manualshive.com logo in svg

LG KG245 - Cell Phone 8 MB, User Manual

Introducing the LG KG245 - Cell Phone 8 MB, a feature-packed mobile companion perfect for modern communication. Enhance your user experience by accessing the comprehensive "User Manual" which contains detailed instructions for efficient usage. Download this manual "free" from manualshive.com to unlock the full potential of your LG KG245 and optimize your mobile experience.

Share
Download
background image

14

KG245 

یﺎﻬﻴﮔﮋﻳﻭ

ﺕﺎﻋﻼﻃﺍ

 

ﺶﻳﺎﻤﻧ

K

G245

 

یﺎﻬﻴﮔﮋﻳﻭ

 

ﺕﺎﺤﻴﺿﻮﺗ

 

 

ﻪﻘﻄﻨﻣ

 

 

 

١۵

 

ﻪﺤﻔﺻ

 

ﻪﺑ

 

ﺩﻮﺷ

 

ﯽﻣ

 

ﻩﺩﺍﺩ

 

ﺶﻳﺎﻤﻧ

 

ﻒﻠﺘﺨﻣ

 

یﺎﻫﺩﺎﻤﻧ

 

 

ﻂﺧ

 

ﻦﻴﻟﻭﺍ

 

.

ﺪﻴﻨﻛ

 

ﻪﻌﺟﺍﺮﻣ

  

ﯽﺗﺎﻋﻼﻃﺍ

 

ﻪﻧﻮﮔﺮﻫ

 

ﻭ

 

ﺎﻫ

 

ﻞﻤﻌﻟﺍﺭﻮﺘﺳﺩ

 

،ﺎﻬﻣﺎﻴﭘ

 

ﯽﻧﺎﻴﻣ

 

ﻁﻮﻄﺧ

 

 

ﻪﻛ

 

ﯽﻳﺎﻫ

 

ﻩﺭﺎﻤﺷ

 

ﻞﻴﺒﻗ

 

ﺯﺍ

 

،ﺪﻴﻨﻛ

 

ﯽﻣ

 

ﺩﺭﺍﻭ

 

ﺎﻤﺷ

 

ﻪﻛ

 

   

 

ﻩﺩﺍﺩ

 

ﺶﻳﺎﻤﻧ

 

،ﺪﻳﺭﺍﺩ

 

ﺮﻈﻧ

 

ﺭﺩ

 

یﺮﻴﮔ

 

ﻩﺭﺎﻤﺷ

 

ﺖﻬﺟ

 .

ﺩﻮﺷ

 

ﯽﻣ

 

ﺪﻴﻠﻛ

 

ﻭﺩ

 

ﻪﺑ

 

ﺮﺿﺎﺣ

 

ﻝﺎﺣ

 

ﺭﺩ

 

ﻪﻛ

 

ﯽﻳﺎﻫﺩﺮﻜﻠﻤﻋ

 

 

ﻂﺧ

 

ﻦﻳﺮﺧﺁ

 

.

ﺩﻮﺷ

 

ﯽﻣ

 

ﻩﺩﺍﺩ

 

ﻥﺎﺸﻧ

 

،ﻩﺪﺷ

 

ﻩﺩﺍﺩ

 

ﺹﺎﺼﺘﺧﺍ

 

ﺖﻗﻮﻣ

 

ﺭﺩ

 

ﺎﻫﺩﺎﻤﻧ

 

ﺢﻴﺿﻮﺗ

 .

ﺩﻮﺷ

 

ﯽﻣ

 

ﻩﺩﺍﺩ

 

ﺶﻳﺎﻤﻧ

 

ﻪﺤﻔﺻ

 

ﺭﺩ

 

ﯽﻔﻠﺘﺨﻣ

 

یﺎﻫﺩﺎﻤﻧ

.

ﺖﺳﺍ

 

ﻩﺪﻣﺁ

 

ﻦﻴﻳﺎﭘ

ﻪﺤﻔﺻ

 

ﻯﻭﺭ

 

ﻯﺮﻳﻮﺼﺗ

 

ﻯﺎﻫﺩﺎﻤﻧ

ﺕﺎﺤﻴﺿﻮﺗ

 

ﻯﺮﻳﻮﺼﺗ

 

ﺩﺎﻤﻧ

  

  .

ﺪﻫﺩ

 

ﻰﻣ

 

ﻥﺎﺸﻧ

 

ﺍﺭ

 

ﻪﻜﺒﺷ

 

ﻝﺎﻨﮕﻴﺳ

 

ﺕﺪﺷ

 

 

 

.

ﺖﺳﺍ

 

ﻥﺎﻳﺮﺟ

 

ﺭﺩ

 

ﻰﺳﺎﻤﺗ

 

ﻪﻛ

 

ﺪﻫﺩ

 

ﻰﻣ

 

ﻥﺎﺸﻧ

 

 

 

 

ﺕﺎﻣﺪﺧ

 

ﺯﺍ

 

ﺪﻴﻧﺍﻮﺗ

 

ﯽﻣ

 

ﻪﻛ

 

ﺪﻴﻫﺩ

 

ﯽﻣ

 

ﻥﺎﺸﻧ

 

 

 

.

ﺪﻴﻳﺎﻤﻧ

 

ﻩﺩﺎﻔﺘﺳﺍ

 GPRS

 

ﺭﺩ

 

ﻰﻧﺎﻜﻣﺍﺮﻓ

 

ﻝﺎﺣ

 

ﺭﺩ

 

ﺎﻤﺷ

 

ﻪﻛ

 

ﺪﻫﺩ

 

ﻰﻣ

 

ﻥﺎﺸﻧ

 

 

 

.

ﺪﻴﺘﺴﻫ

 

ﻯﺮﮕﻳﺩ

 

ﻪﻜﺒﺷ

ﻪﺟﻮﺗ

 .

ﺪﻨﻛ

 

ﺮﻴﻴﻐﺗ

 

ﻪﻜﺒﺷ

 

ﺶﺷﻮﭘ

 

ﺱﺎﺳﺍ

 

ﺮﺑ

 

ﺖﺳﺍ

 

ﻦﻜﻤﻣ

 

ﻪﻤﻟﺎﻜﻣ

 

ﺖﻴﻔﻴﻛ

  

◄

 

ﺖﻣﺎﺻ

 

ﺖﺳﺍ

 

ﻦﻜﻤﻣ

 

ﺪﺷﺎﺑ

 

ﺭﺎﺑ

 

٢

 

ﺯﺍ

 

ﺮﺘﻤﻛ

 

ﻝﺎﻨﮕﻴﺳ

 

ﺕﺭﺪﻗ

 

ﺮﮔﺍ

 .

ﺪﺷﺎﺑ

 

ﻪﺘﺷﺍﺩ

 

ﯽﭘ

 

ﺭﺩ

 

ﺍﺭ

 

ﺍﺪﺻ

 

ﺪﺑ

 

ﺖﻴﻔﻴﻛ

 

ﻭ

 

ﺱﺎﻤﺗ

 

ﻊﻄﻗ

 

،ﻥﺪﺷ

 

ﻪﺼﺨﺸﻣ

 

ﺎﺑ

 

ﻖﺑﺎﻄﻣ

 

ﺍﺭ

 

ﻪﻜﺒﺷ

 

ﺭﺎﺑ

 

ًﺎﻔﻄﻟ

 

،ﺩﻮﺧ

 

یﺎﻫ

 

ﺱﺎﻤﺗ

 

یﺍﺮﺑ

 

ﺶﺷﻮﭘ

 

ﺩﻮﺟﻭ

 

ﻡﺪﻋ

 

ﺮﮕﻧﺎﺸﻧ

 

،ﺭﺎﺑ

 

ﺩﻮﺟﻭ

 

ﻡﺪﻋ

 .

ﺪﻳﺭﺍﺩ

 

ﻪﮕﻧ

 

ﺎﻫ

 

ﭻﻴﻫ

 

یﺍﺮﺑ

 

ﻪﻜﺒﺷ

 

ﻪﺑ

 

ﯽﺳﺮﺘﺳﺩ

 

،ﺖﻟﺎﺣ

 

ﻦﻳﺍ

 

ﺭﺩ

 :

ﺖﺳﺍ

 

یﺍ

 

ﻪﻜﺒﺷ

 

ﻥﺎﻜﻣﺍ

 (

ﻞﻴﺒﻗ

 

ﻦﻳﺍ

 

ﺯﺍ

 

یﺩﺭﺍﻮﻣ

 

ﻭ

 

ﺎﻫ

 

ﻡﺎﻴﭘ

 

،ﺱﺎﻤﺗ

) 

ﺕﺎﻣﺪﺧ

 

ﺯﺍ

 

ﻚﻳ

.

ﺖﺴﻴﻧ

 

ﺮﻳﺬﭘ

ﺩﺎﻤﻧ

 

ﻪﻘﻄﻨﻣ

 

ﺮﻳﻮﺼﺗ

 

ﻭ

 

ﻦﺘﻣ

 

ﻪﻘﻄﻨﻣ

ﯽﻜﻴﻓﺍﺮﮔ

ﺖﻗﻮﻣ

 

ﺪﻴﻠﻛ

 

یﺎﻫ

 

ﻪﻧﺎﺸﻧ

   

ﻦﻔﻠﺗ

                 

ﯽﻣﺎﺳﺍ

  

Summary of Contents for KG245 - Cell Phone 8 MB

Page 1: ...K G 2 4 5 P N MMBB0203008 1 0 H K G 2 4 5 USER GUIDE Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider K G 2 4 5 ENGLISH ENGLISH ...

Page 2: ... ﺇﻟﻰ ً ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ KG245 ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ...

Page 3: ...ﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ 21 ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻧﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ 24 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 25 ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ 27 ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺳﺮﺩ 29 ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ 30 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺠﻞ 32 ﺑﺤﺚ 32 ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ 3132 ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 6 ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ 7 ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ 10 KG245 ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء 14 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ 16 ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ 17 ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎ...

Page 4: ...ﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ 38 ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ 41 ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺣﺬﻑ 41 ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ 42 ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ 42 ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ 43 ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ 44 ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ 45 ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ 46 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ 35 ﻭﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ 36 ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ 36 ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ 36 ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻌﺎﺏ 3736 ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ 38 ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ 35 ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻞ ّ ﻣﺴﺠ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ 39 ﺍﻟ...

Page 5: ...ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻈﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ 57 ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ 57 ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ GPRS ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ 58 ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ 51 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 53 ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺿﺒﻂ 52 ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 53 ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ 54 ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ 55 ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ ﺁﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳ...

Page 6: ... 66 ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ 67 ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ 63 ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ 66 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ 66 ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ 64 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ MP3 65 ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ...

Page 7: ...ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﺳﻮء ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ...

Page 8: ... ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻔﻲ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ SAR ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ICNIPR ﺍﻷﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ 10 ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﺍﺕ 2 ﻣﻌﺪﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ SAR ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ DASY4 ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺟﺮﺍﻡ 10 ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺕ 0 122 ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘ...

Page 9: ...ﻮﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ً ًﺎ ﻳ ﻳﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻋﻂ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ً ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺍ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﺪ...

Page 10: ...ﻗﺪ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻻ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻥ ً ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻻ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﻻ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻻ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﺒﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻦ ﻳﻀﻌﻒ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺗﻢ ﻟﻘﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ LG ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳ...

Page 11: ... ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 3 ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺖ ّ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍ 4 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء n o p q ...

Page 12: ... ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 6 ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 7 ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ 8 ﻓﻼﺵ 9 ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ LCD ﺷﺎﺷﺔ 10 t s u w v r ...

Page 13: ...ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ً ﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ o r s u t p q ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ...

Page 14: ...13 KG245 ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ SIM ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ...

Page 15: ...ﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺷﺮﻃﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍ ً ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ُﺮﺟﻰ ﻳ ﺎ ً ﺭﺩﻳﺌ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺸ...

Page 16: ...ﻭﻟﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ WAP ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ GPRS ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ...

Page 17: ...ﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ 1 ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺰﻻﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ 2 ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ SIM ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ...

Page 18: ...ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ 3 ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ًﺎ ﻳ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍ ﺣﺮﻳ...

Page 19: ...2 ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻛﻼ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ً ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻻ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻢ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ...

Page 20: ...ﺩﻋﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ 8 ﺇﻟﻰ 4 ﻣﻦ PUK ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻢ PIN ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ PIN ﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ PUK ﺭﻣﺰ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ً ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ PUK ﺭﻣﺰ ﻳﺮﻓﻖ ﻗﺪ ﻣﻨﻌﻪ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ 8 ﺇﻟﻰ 4 ﻣﻦ PUK2 ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ PUK2 ﺭﻣﺰ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻘ...

Page 21: ...ﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ 1 ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻢ 2 ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 3 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺣﻔﻆ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎ...

Page 22: ...ﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ LCD ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺤﺴﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ً ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻭﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ...

Page 23: ...ﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﻣﻦ ً ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺤﺎ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ T9 ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺌﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ 1 ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ...

Page 24: ...ﺿﻐﻄﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ 2 ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺤﻮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ً ...

Page 25: ...ﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻃﻠﺒﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﻠﺒﻪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻ...

Page 26: ...ﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ DTMF ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء DTMF ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ DTMF on ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ DTMF ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ DTMF ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨ...

Page 27: ...ﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑ...

Page 28: ... ﻭﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ 3 ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ 1 3 ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ 2 3 ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ 3 3 ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻌﺎﺏ 4 3 ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ 5 3 ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ 6 3 ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ 7 3 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻞ ّ ﻣﺴﺠ 8 3 SIM ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 9 3 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺠﻞ 1 ﺑﺤﺚ 1 1 ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ 2 1 ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ 3 1 ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ 4 1 ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ 5 1 ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ 6 1 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 7 1 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺠﻞ 2 ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻟﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ 1 2 ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ 2 2 ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ 3 2 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ 4 2 ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ 5 2 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤ...

Page 29: ...ﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻌﺎﺏ 4 9 ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ 5 9 ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ 8 ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ 1 8 ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ 2 8 ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ 3 8 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 4 8 ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ 6 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 7 ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ 1 7 ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ 2 7 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 3 7 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 4 7 ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 5 7 ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 6 7 GPRS ﺿﺒﻂ 7 7 ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 8 7 ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ 9 7 ...

Page 30: ...ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ً ﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ...

Page 31: ...ﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﻮ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ً ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ً ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ 3 1 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ 2 1 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ 1000 ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً ﺣﺮﻓﺎ 14 ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ...

Page 32: ... ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ً ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ 1 ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ 2 ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ 3 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻛﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ 4 ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 5 1 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺭ...

Page 33: ...ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ 1 ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ 2 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ SIM ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭ ّ ﻣﺮ 1 ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮ...

Page 34: ...ﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ 10 ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻵﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ 3 2 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ 10 ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻵﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﺠﺮﺩ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻓﺘ...

Page 35: ... ﻴ ﺳ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ 3 6 2 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ PIN2 ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻫ...

Page 36: ...ﻲ ﺗﺪﻕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ 5 ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺪﺩ 1 ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺣﺪﺩ 2 ﻳﻮﻡ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺑﻌﺎء ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ 3 ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻢ 4 ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ pcsync ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻠﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎ...

Page 37: ...ﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻛﻐﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ 3 3 3 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺪ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺿﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ًﺎ ﻴ ﻣﺮﺋ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜ...

Page 38: ...E ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻻ ﻗﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺠﺐ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻓﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﺤﺘﻢ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ...

Page 39: ...ﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺣﺪﺩ 2 ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ 3 7 3 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻟﻤﺪﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ 2 ﺿﺒﻂ 8 3 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻞ ّ ﻣﺴﺠ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ 10 ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ 15 ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻴ...

Page 40: ...ﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ُﻈﻬﺮ ﻳ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﻞ ّ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ 9 3 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ SIM ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ SIM ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ ...

Page 41: ... ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء 2 1 4 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ 3 1 4 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻋ...

Page 42: ...ﺓ ﺣﺪﺩ 1 ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻢ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ 2 ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ 3 3 4 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺳﺘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺫﺍ ﺇ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ...

Page 43: ...ﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ 5 ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ 1 ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 2 ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍ...

Page 44: ...ﺔ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ 2 ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 3 ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 4 ﺃﻭ ﻧﺺ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ 100 ﻫﻮ MMS ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺣﻖ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ...

Page 45: ... ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ T9 ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ T9 ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ T9 off ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ T9 ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻙ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء 2 5 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ SIM ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻇﻬﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭ...

Page 46: ...ﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ 3 5 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ...

Page 47: ...ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻢ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ 1 6 5 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ 1 ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻈﻞ 2 2 6 5 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ...

Page 48: ...ﻮﻃﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻄﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻢ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘ...

Page 49: ...ﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻟﻬﺎ ً ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ 4 8 5 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺣﺪ...

Page 50: ...160x128 ﺍﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 240x320 160x128 48x48 ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ 480x640 240x320 160x128 ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ 160x128 ﺍﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ً ﺟﺪﺍ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻰﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ 4x ﺃﻭ 3x ﺃﻭ 2x ﺍﻟﻰ 1x ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻗﻴ...

Page 51: ... ٍ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 1 ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ 2 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺿﻮء ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺿﻐﻂ ...

Page 52: ...ﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤ...

Page 53: ... ﻳﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻨﺔ 2 2 7 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ 24 ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ 12 3 7 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ 1 3 7 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ LCD ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ LCD ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎ...

Page 54: ...ﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺑﻼ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺸﻐﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ً ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻻ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ً ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺑﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻣﻜ...

Page 55: ...15 ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻞ ّ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻠﺔ ّ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ...

Page 56: ...ﺒﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ 6 4 7 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ 7 4 7 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺁﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ً ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻟﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﺸ...

Page 57: ...ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺩﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻈﺮ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮ...

Page 58: ...ﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﻀﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺳﻴﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺃﻭﻝ ...

Page 59: ...ﻴﻞ ﻳﻈﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ GPRS 2 7 7 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ GPRS ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ WAP ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺅﻩ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ WAP ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ 8 7 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﺩﻉ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ SIM ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﺩﻉ 9 7 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ...

Page 60: ...ﺍﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ WAP ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ WAP ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ WAP ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ 1 8 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ...

Page 61: ...ﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ URL 4 8 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ 1 4 8 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ WAP ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋ...

Page 62: ...ﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ IP ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﻢ IP ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺭﻗﻢ DNS ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ DNS ﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ IP ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ DNS ﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ IP ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ 2 4 8 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ...

Page 63: ...ﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ 6 4 8 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ...

Page 64: ... ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ 2 1 9 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ 1 1 9 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻞ 3 1 9 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﻛﻮﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘ...

Page 65: ...ﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ًﺎ ﻴ ﺣﺎﻟ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ SMS ﺃﻭ MMS ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 2 3 9 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ MMS ﺑﻮﺍ...

Page 66: ...ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ 4 3 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑـ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ 5 9 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻈﻬﺮ ُ ﺗ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ...

Page 67: ...ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ً ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ LG ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ...

Page 68: ...67 ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ KG245 ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺳﻢ GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ C 55 ﺃﻗﺼﻰ C 10 ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ...

Page 69: ......

Page 70: ... ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ KG245 ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ...

Page 71: ...ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ 24 ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ 25 ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی 27 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ 29 ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ 30 ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ 32 ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ 32 ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ 3132 ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ 32 ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ 6 ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ 7 ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 10 KG245 ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء 14 ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ 16 ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ 17 ﺑ...

Page 72: ... ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ 41 ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ 42 ﮐﻠﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ 43 ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ 42 ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ 44 ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﻦ z ﻧﻮﺵ 45 ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ 46 ﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ 47 ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ 36 ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻧﮕﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 36 Bluetooth 37 ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی 36 ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯی 3836 ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ 39 ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ 35 ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 40 ﺻﺪﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﻤ...

Page 73: ...ﻭﺩﻳﺖ 59 ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ 57 ﺷﺒﻜﻪ 60 ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ GPRS ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻥ z ﻛﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ 61 ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ 53 ﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎ 53 ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ 54 ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ 55 ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ 56 ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﮕﻴﺮ 57 ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ 58 ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻮﻕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ...

Page 74: ...ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ 70 ﻓﻨﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ 66 ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻋﻜﺲ 66 ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ 66 ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻙ 67 ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ MP3 68 ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ...

Page 75: ...ﺑﺎ ﻛﻪ KG245 ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻳﻦ ﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻭ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ً ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ...

Page 76: ...ﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ICNIRP ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺸﻌﺸﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ﮔﺮﻡ ١٠ ﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﺮ ﻭﺍﺕ ٢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی SAR ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻡ ١٠ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﺮ ﻭﺍﺕ 0 122 ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ DASY۴ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺮﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ...

Page 77: ...ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍی ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﺭﻙ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍ...

Page 78: ...ﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺳﻠﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺗﻜﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﮐ...

Page 79: ...ﺎی ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ٣ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰی ﻣﻨﻮی ﺳﺎﺯی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻦ ٤ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ n o q p ...

Page 80: ...ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﭘﺲ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ٧ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎﻯ ٨ ﻓﻼﺵ ٩ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ LCD ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ١٠ t s u w v r ...

Page 81: ...ﺍﺭﺩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ً ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍ ً ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ً ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍ ً ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ً ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍ ً ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ً ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍ ً ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ n ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻳﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻭ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ً ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ...

Page 82: ...13 ﭘﺸﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮔﻴﺮﻩ KG245 ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ...

Page 83: ...ﻯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ GPRS ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻰ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﺭ ٢ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﭘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ً ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﺎی ﺗ...

Page 84: ...ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ WAP ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ GPRS ...

Page 85: ...ﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ٣ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻼﻳﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ...

Page 86: ...ﺼﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮ ﺍ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺭﻋﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﻮﺯی ﺁﺗﺶ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻴﺰ ﻧﻮﻙ ﺍﺷﻴ...

Page 87: ...ﺪﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻯ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ً ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ ً ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻯ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺟﺪﺍﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ً ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ...

Page 88: ...ﻗﻤﯽ ٨ ﺗﺎ ۴ ﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی PIN ﻛﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ PUK ﻛﺪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻴﺰ PUK ﻛﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ PIN ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩ ﻛﺪ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺭﻗﻤﯽ ٨ ﺗﺎ ۴ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻪ PUK٢ ﻛﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ PUK٢ ﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻗﻤﯽ ٨ ﺗﺎ ...

Page 89: ...ﻠﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ١ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻛﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﻛﺪ ٢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ٣ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻤ...

Page 90: ...ﻟﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺟﻬﺘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮔﺮ ﺍ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﻭﺱ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ LCD ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣ...

Page 91: ...ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﻟﻐﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺒﺎﻫﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻟﻐﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ T٩ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ T٩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ...

Page 92: ... ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ABC ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎی ﻛﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ١ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ٢ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸ...

Page 93: ... ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻳﻚ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻬﺎی ﻭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓ...

Page 94: ... ﺩﻭﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻭﻣﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ۴ ٣ ٧ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣ...

Page 95: ...ﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻭ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ...

Page 96: ... ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ٣ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ١ ٣ ﺯﻧﮕﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ٢ ٣ Bluetooth ٣ ٣ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯی ۴ ٣ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ۵ ٣ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ۶ ٣ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ٧ ٣ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ٨ ٣ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ٩ ٣ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ١ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ١ ١ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ٢ ١ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ٣ ١ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ۴ ١ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ۵ ١ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ۶ ١ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ٧ ١ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺛﺒﺖ ٢ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ١ ٢ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ٢ ٢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ٣ ٢ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ۴ ٢ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺣﺬﻑ ...

Page 97: ...ﺎﻭﻳﺮ ٢ ٩ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ٣ ٩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎ ۴ ٩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ۵ ٩ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ٨ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ١ ٨ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ٢ ٨ URL ﺑﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ٣ ٨ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ۴ ٨ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ۶ ﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎ ٧ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ١ ٧ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ٢ ٧ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ٣ ٧ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ۴ ٧ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﯽ ۵ ٧ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ۶ ٧ GPRS ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ٧ ٧ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ٨ ٧ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ٩ ٧ ...

Page 98: ...ﻰ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻯ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻯ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ً ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻯ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ...

Page 99: ...th ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺒﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻛﭙﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻛﭙﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﭙﯽ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭ...

Page 100: ...ﺯﻧﮓ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﯽ ﺯﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺮ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻫﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﻋﻀﺎی ﻋﻀﻮ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ٢٠ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﻋﻀﺎی ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻀﻮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻟﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻋﻀﺎی ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ۴ ١ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﮔﻴﺮی ...

Page 101: ...ﻤﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻘﻂ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻥ ﺍﻣﮑﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓ...

Page 102: ... ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ٢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﯽ ﮐﺪ ٣ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺴﻬﺎی ...

Page 103: ...ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﻧﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ٣ ٢ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ١٠ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻧ...

Page 104: ...ﻮﻟﯽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﭘﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﻮﻳﺶ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺮﺥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ٢ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺒﻨﺎی ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ...

Page 105: ...ﺯﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ٢ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ٣ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻡ ۴ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﭙﻐﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ً ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ۵ ١ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ Bluetooth ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺎی...

Page 106: ... ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ Bluetooth ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ Bluetooth ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ Bluetooth ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ٣ ٣ ٣ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺭﺍ Bluetooth ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ً ﻗﺒﻼ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ bluetooth ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ Bluetooth ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺅﻳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ...

Page 107: ... ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺟﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ JAD ﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ JAR ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻳﮏ JAR ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺰ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻔﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ JAD ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ...

Page 108: ...ﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ٥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ٦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ۶ ٣ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎی ﺑﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻧﻮﻉ ٩ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ١ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳ...

Page 109: ...ﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎ ١ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ٢ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﯽ ٣ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ٢ ٨ ٣ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﺎک ﻳﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ٩ ٣ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣ...

Page 110: ...ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ٢ ١ ۴ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﺎی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ...

Page 111: ...ﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ١ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ٢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ٣ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ٣ ۴ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺴﯽ ﻭ ﻗﻤﺮی ﻣﻴﻼﺩی ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮ ﺍ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ...

Page 112: ...ﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺧ...

Page 113: ...ﯽ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ١ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ٢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ٣ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ً ﻗﺒﻼ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ۴ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ...

Page 114: ... ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ T٩ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ T٩ABC ﺭﻭی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ T٩Abc T٩abc ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ T٩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ T٩ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ T٩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ T٩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ٢ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻲ ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘ...

Page 115: ... ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ٣ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫ...

Page 116: ...ﻳﻚ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺳﻬﺎﻡ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻧﻰ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﯽ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ١ ۶ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ١ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧ...

Page 117: ... ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ٨ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ١ ٨ ۵ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﭘﺴﺖ X ۴٠٠ ﻣﻠﯽ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻓﺎﮐﺲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﺘﻦ ERMES ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﻣﻘﺘﻀﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ...

Page 118: ...ﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ URL ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﺭﮔﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻐﺎﺕ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ٣ ٨ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻴﺮﺳﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻳﮏ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤ...

Page 119: ...ﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺖ ۵ ٨ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻃﻮﺭی ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭ ...

Page 120: ...128x160 ﭼﻨﺪﺗﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ 320x240 640x480 128x160 ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ 48x48 128x160 320x240 ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ 640x480 128x160 320x240 ﭼﻨﺪﺗﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ 128x160 ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﺪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﺒﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻋﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ On ﮐﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ...

Page 121: ...ﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ 10 ﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ 5 ﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ 3 ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻪ ١ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻳﮏ ٢ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﻪ ...

Page 122: ...ﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﭙﺲ ٣ ٢ ١ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﯽ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺯﻧﮓ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ...

Page 123: ...ﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ٢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ٢ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﺮﻁ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ١ ٢ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﮑﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺯ ٢ ٢ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍ...

Page 124: ... ﮐﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ٢ ٣ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ۴ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ١ ۴ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺗﺎ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻓﮑﺲ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﻣﻴﺪﻫ...

Page 125: ...ﺦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻫﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺳﻮی ﺍﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ٢ ١ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭی ﺩﻫﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺻﻮ...

Page 126: ...ﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ۵ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮔﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ١٠ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮔﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ٣ ۴ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎی ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﮐ...

Page 127: ...ﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺩﺭ ١ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻨﻮی ٢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ٣ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻏﻠﻂ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ٣ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﮔﺮ ۴ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ PUK Code ﺑﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺭ ١٠ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺍ PUK Code ۵ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ...

Page 128: ...ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ۵ ۵ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ PI...

Page 129: ...ﻩ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ٢ ۶ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ EGSM DCS EGSM DCS ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ EGSM PCS EGSM PCS ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ٧ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ GPRS ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ GPRS ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ١ ٧ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺛﺒﺖ GPRS ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑ...

Page 130: ...ﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ٩ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﮐﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ...

Page 131: ... ﻫﺮﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺵ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ WAP ﻛﺎﻭﺷﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺏ ﻛﺎﻭﺷﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ WAP ﻛﺎﻭﺷﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ١ ٨ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ...

Page 132: ...ﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﺹ URL ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ۴ ٨ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻛﻮﻛﯽ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ١ ۴ ٨ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ WAP ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﻥ URL ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ﺁﺩ...

Page 133: ...ﺩ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﭘﺮﺍﮐﺴﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﭘﺮﺍﮐﺴﻲ ﻣﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﺴﯽ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ IP ﺁﺩﺭﺱ IP ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﺴﯽ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ DNS ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ DNS ﺳﺮﻭﺭ IP ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ DNS ﺳﺮﻭﺭ IP ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﻣﺸﺨﺺ...

Page 134: ...ﻙ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻮﻛﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎی ﻫﻤﻪ ۶ ۴ ٨ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ی ﻫﺎ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭی ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﺠﻮﺯﻫﺎی ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ...

Page 135: ...ﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﭘﺎک ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ۴ ١ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ١ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﭘﺲ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ١ ١ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ٩ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺣﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﯽ ﺟﻨﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍ...

Page 136: ...ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻣﻠﻮﺩی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ Bluetooth ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ Bluetooth ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ٢ ٣ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ MMS ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻳ...

Page 137: ...ﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ١ ١ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ۵ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍی ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ Bluetooth ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ Bluetooth ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺩ...

Page 138: ...ﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﻴﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ LG ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ...

Page 139: ...70 ﻓﻨﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ KG245 ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ C 55 ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺣﺪ C 45 ﻯ ﺃﻗﺺ ...

Page 140: ...KG245 USER GUIDE Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider ENGLISH ...

Page 141: ...ess Codes 22 General Functions 24 Making and answering calls Adjusting the volume Answering a call 25 Entering text Contacts 28 In call menu Multiparty or conference calls 30 Menu Tree 32 Selecting functions and options 34 Contacts 35 Search Add new Caller groups 36 Speed dials Own number 37 My Business card Settings Call register 39 Missed calls Received calls Dialled calls All calls Delete recen...

Page 142: ...View list 46 SIM services Organiser 47 Calendar Add new View View all 48 Delete past Delete all Memo Calendar Settings Message 49 New message Write text message Write multimedia message 50 Inbox 51 Drafts 52 Outbox Listen to voice mail 53 Info message Read Topics 54 Templates Text templates Multimedia templates Settings Text message Multimedia message 55 Voice mail centre Info message 56 Push mess...

Page 143: ...4 Send my number Call waiting Minute minder Auto redial Security 64 PIN code request Handset lock 65 Call barring Fixed dial number 66 Change codes Network Network select Band select 67 GPRS attach Switch on When needed Memory status 68 Reset settings Browser 69 Home Bookmarks 70 Go to URL Settings Profiles Cache 71 Cookie 72 Clear cache Clear cookie Security Ta b l e o f C o n te n ts ...

Page 144: ...tures General pictures Phonebook pictures Delete all Images 74 Default Images Downloaded Sounds Default sounds Voice records MP3 ringtones 75 Downloaded Games Apps Others Accessories 76 Technical data 77 Ta b l e o f C o n te n ts ...

Page 145: ...his user s guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage to or misuse of the phone Any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this user s guide could void your warranty for this equipment Introduction 6 I n t ro d u c t i o n ...

Page 146: ...sly damage your phone Keep the phone in a safe place out of small children s reach It includes small parts which if detached may cause a choking hazard Caution Switch off the phone in any area where required by special regulations For example do not use your phone in hospitals or it may affect sensitive medical equipment Emergency calls may not be available under all mobile networks Therefore you ...

Page 147: ...ous LG phone models they are all designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to radio waves The SAR limit recommended by the International Commission on Non Ionizing Radiation Protection ICNIRP is 2W kg averaged over ten 10 gram of tissue The highest SAR value for this model phone tested by DASY4 for use at the ear is 0 122 W kg 10g SAR data information for residents in countries regions...

Page 148: ...tion on the magnetic strips Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as it may damage the phone Do not expose the phone to liquid or moisture Use accessories such as earphones and headsets with caution Ensure that cables are tucked away safely Please remove the data cable before powering on the handset Electronics devices All mobile phones may get interference which could affect performance Do no...

Page 149: ...exposed to loud sound for long periods of time We therefore recommend that you do not turn on or off the handset close to your ear We also recommend that music and call volumes are set to a reasonable level Blasting area Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress Observe restrictions and follow any regulations or rules Potentially explosive atmospheres Do not use the phone at a refueIling ...

Page 150: ... other battery systems there is no memory effect that could compromise the battery s performance Use only LG batteries and chargers LG chargers are designed to maximize the battery life Do not disassemble or short circuit the battery pack Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance The battery pack may be recharged hundred...

Page 151: ...various function Bottom Soft key indications 3 Alpha numeric keys In standby mode Input numbers to dial Hold down International calls Activate Voice mail centre menu to Speed dials Activate Timer in Takepicture mode Activate Flash on Takepicture mode In editing mode Enter numbers characters 4 Microphone Menu Contacts ...

Page 152: ...et jack Connect a headset here 6 Side keys In standby mode opened Volume of key tone In standby mode closed Backlight on In menu scroll up down During a call volume of the earpiece 7 Side camera key 8 Camera lens 9 Flash 10 Sub LCD ...

Page 153: ... dialled received and missed call Clear key Navigation key In standby mode Briefly List of Favourites Briefly List of Contacts Briefly List of Messages Briefly List of Profiles Hold down Activate Deactivate Vibrate mode In menu scroll up down Scheduler hot key Activate the Scheduler menu directly Soft keys These keys perform the function Indicated in the bottom of the display Camera hot key ...

Page 154: ...15 KG 245 f e at u res Holes for a carrying strap SIM card socket Battery terminals Battery latch SIM card terminals Battery pack Battery cover Charger connector Cable connector ...

Page 155: ... means that there is no network coverage in this case you won t be able to access the network for any service call messages and so on Icon area Text and graphic area Soft key indications Icon Description Tells you the strength of the network signal Call is connected You can use GPRS service Shows that you are using a roaming service Area Description First line Displays various icons See page 17 Mi...

Page 156: ...ceived a text message You have received a voice mail You can view your schedule Vibrate only menu in profile General menu in profile Loud menu in profile Silent menu in profile Headset menu in profile You can divert a call Indicates that the phone is accessing the WAP Indicates that you are using GPRS Bluetooth activated ...

Page 157: ...e battery from the battery compartment 3 Install the SIM card Insert the SIM card into the holder Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder Make sure that the SIM card is inserted properly and that the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards To remove the SIM card press down lightly and pull it in the reverse direction Getting started 18 G ett i n g s ta r te d Note Removing the batter...

Page 158: ...pace 5 Replace the battery cover Lay the battery cover in place of the phone and slide it until the latch clicks Charging the Battery To connect the mains adapter to the phone you must have installed the battery Caution The metal contact of the SIM card can be easily damaged by scratches Pay special attention to the SIM card while handling Follow the instructions supplied with the SIM card ...

Page 159: ...the grey tabs on both sides of the connector and pull the connector out G ett i n g s ta r te d Caution Do not force the connector as this may damage the phone and or the travel adapter Insert the battery pack charger vertically to wall power outlet If you use the battery pack charger out of your own country use an attachment plug adapter for the proper configuration Do not remove your battery or ...

Page 160: ...e first using the phone Do not remove the battery or SIM card while charging In the case the battery is not properly charged please turn the phone off and on using the power key then recharge the battery After detaching and reattaching the battery please recharge the battery ...

Page 161: ...ber These functions are only available if supported by your SIM card Check with your network for further information PUK code 4 to 8 digits The PUK PIN Unblocking Key code is required to change a blocked PIN code The PUK code may be supplied with the SIM card If not contact your network operator for the code If you lose the code also contact your network operator PUK2 code 4 to 8 digits The PUK2 c...

Page 162: ... The netwok password is required when you use Call barring Menu 7 5 3 function You obtain the password from your network operator when you subscribe to this function See page 65 for further details G ett i n g s ta r te d ...

Page 163: ... the up down navigation key 3 Press Making an international call 1 Press and hold the key for the international prefix The character automatically selects the international access code 2 Enter the country code area code and the phone number 3 Press Ending a call When you have finished your call press the end key Making a call from the Contacts You can save the names and phone numbers dialled regul...

Page 164: ...an activate the manner mode by pressing and holding down the key after opening the phone Signal strength You can check the strength of your signal by the signal indicator on the LCD screen of your phone Signal strength can vary particularly inside buildings Moving near to a window may improve reception Entering text You can enter alphanumeric characters by using the phone s keypad For example stor...

Page 165: ... To change to 123 mode in a text entry field press the key until 123 mode is displayed Changing the text input mode 1 When you are in a field that allows characters to be entered you will notice the text input mode indicator in the upper right corner of the LCD screen 2 Change the text input mode by pressing You can check the current text input mode in the upper right corner of the LCD screen Usin...

Page 166: ...Press the left soft key Option then select T9 languages Select the desired language of T9 mode You can also turn off the T9 mode by selecting T9 off The default setting on the phone is T9 enabled mode 2 Enter the whole word before editing or deleting any keystrokes 3 Complete each word with a space by pressing the key To delete letters press Press and hold down to erase entire words Using the ABC ...

Page 167: ...hone memory The SIM card and phone are both used in the same way in the Contacts menu In call menu Your phone provides a number of control functions that you can use during a call To access these functions during a call press the left soft key Options Key Upper Case Lower Case 1 1 ABC2ÄÀÁÂÃÅÆÇ abc2äàáâãåæç D E F 3 Ë È É Ê d e f 3 ë è é ê G H I 4 Ï Ì Í Î g h i 4 ï ì í î J K L 5 j k l 5 MNO6ÑÖØÒÓÔÕŒ...

Page 168: ...the earpiece and the display will show that a second call is waiting This feature known as Call waiting is only available if your network supports it For details of how to activate and deactivate it see Call waiting Menu 7 4 5 on page 64 If Call waiting is activated you can put the first call on hold and answer the second by pressing or by selecting right soft key Answer You can end the current ca...

Page 169: ...ultiparty call but still connected to you by the person who set up the multiparty call These options are all available from the In Call menu The maximum callers in a multiparty call are five Once started you are in control of the multiparty call and only you can add callers to the multiparty call Making a second call You can make a second call while currently on a call Enter the second number and ...

Page 170: ...uring a conference call To have a private call with one caller from a conference call display the number of the caller you wish to talk to on the screen then press the left soft key Select the Multiparty Private to put all the other callers on hold Ending a conference call The currently displayed caller from a conference call can be disconnected by pressing the key To end a conference call press t...

Page 171: ...calls 2 5 Delete recent calls 2 6 Call charges 2 7 GPRS information 3 Tools 3 1 Favourites 3 2 Alarm clock 3 3 Bluetooth 3 4 Games Apps 3 5 Calculator 3 6 Unit converter 3 7 World time 3 8 Voice recorder 3 9 SIM services 4 Organiser 4 1 Calendar 4 2 Memo 4 3 Calendar Settings 5 Message 5 1 New message 5 2 Inbox 5 3 Drafts 5 4 Outbox 5 5 Listen to voice mail 5 6 Info message 5 7 Templates 5 8 Setti...

Page 172: ...7 2 Date Time 7 3 Handset 7 4 Call setting 7 5 Security 7 6 Network 7 7 GPRS attach 7 8 Memory status 7 9 Reset settings 8 Browser 8 1 Home 8 2 Bookmarks 8 3 Go to URL 8 4 Settings 9 My stuff 9 1 Photos 9 2 Images 9 3 Sounds 9 4 Games Apps 9 5 Others ...

Page 173: ...b menus accessed via the two soft keys marked and Each menu and sub menu lets you view and alter the settings of a particular function The roles of the soft keys vary according to the current context the label on the bottom line of the screen just above each key indicates its current role Press the left soft key to access the available Menu Press the right soft key to access the available Contacts...

Page 174: ...u can copy an entry from SIM to phone or from phone to SIM Assign speed dial You can assign the entry as a speed dial Main number You can select the one out of mobile home office that you often use After you set this the main number will be displayed first when you search View caller groups For further details see Menu 1 3 Add new Menu 1 2 You can add phonebook entry by using this function Phone m...

Page 175: ... shouldn t be exceeded 20 Remove member You can remove the member from the Group member list But the name and the number still remain in phonebook Rename You can change a group name Remove all You can delete all the members in the group Speed dials Menu 1 4 You can assign any of the keys to with a Name list entry You can call directly by pressing this key 1 Open the phonebook first by pressing the...

Page 176: ...re an entry to SIM or Handset View options Scroll to highlight View options and then press the left soft key OK Name only Set the phonebook list with displaying only name Name number Set the phonebook list with displaying name and number With pictures Set the phonebook list with the information of character and picture Copy Move all You can copy move entries from SIM card memory to Handset memory ...

Page 177: ...ou wish to erase and then press the left soft key OK 3 Enter security code and Press the left soft key OK or the right soft key Back Service dial number Use this function to access a particular list of services provided by your network operator if supported by the SIM card Contacts 38 C o n ta c ts ...

Page 178: ... both in Address book Send a message to this number Delete the call from the list Received calls Menu 2 2 This option lets you view the last 10 incoming calls You can also View the number if available and call it or save it in Address Book Enter a new name for the number and save both in Address Book Send a message to this number Delete the call from the list Dialled calls Menu 2 3 This option let...

Page 179: ... all calls by pressing the left soft key Yes Call costs Menu 2 6 2 Allows you to check the cost of your Last call All calls Remaining and Reset all To reset the cost you need to PIN2 code Settings Menu 2 6 3 Set tariff You can set the currency type and the unit price Contact your service providers to obtain charging unit prices To select the currency or unit in this menu you need the PIN2 code Set...

Page 180: ...twork through the GPRS information option In addition you can also view how much time you were online Call duration Menu 2 7 1 You can check the duration of Last call and All calls You can also Reset all the call timers Data volumes Menu 2 7 2 You can check the Sent Received or All data volumes and Reset all ...

Page 181: ...in Bluetooth connectivity which makes it possible to connect them with compatible Bluetooth headsets computer applications and so on Paired devices Menu 3 3 1 You can view all devices which are compatible with Bluetooth phone To o l s Note If you use a pcsync via Bluetooth you can exchange the data within only the phonebook When you receive data from another Bluetooth device the phone requests for...

Page 182: ...ooth devices All service Allows you to view all services which are supported by a Bluetooth device Delete Allows you to delete the Bluetooth device Delete all Allows you to delete all Bluetooth devices Settings Menu 3 3 3 You can register a new device which is compatible with Bluetooth If you already have added the device you can search it after entering a password Set Bluetooth You can activate o...

Page 183: ...ior to download you can view all detailed file descriptions from the JAD file While being based on a standard language J2ME not all Java applications are compatible with all handsets on sale so far as specific libraries may be used for a telephone model The software may be blocked or switch itself on when Java applications not specifically developed for the phone this manual refers to are download...

Page 184: ...ypes that can be converted into units Length Area Weight and Volume 1 You can select one of four unit types by pressing Unit key 2 Select the unit you want to convert by pressing and It s impossible to input symbol in unit converter 3 Select the standard value by using World time Menu 3 7 You can view clocks of the world s major cities 1 Select the city belonged to the time zone by pressing key 2 ...

Page 185: ... in Voice memo title press the left soft key OK View list Menu 3 8 2 The phone shows voice memo list You can Playback and Delete the recorded voice memo In addition you can send a multimedia message SIM services Menu 3 9 This menu depends on SIM and the network services To o l s ...

Page 186: ... month and year In the scheduler mode press left soft key Options as follows Add new Menu 4 1 1 Allows you to add new schedule and memo for the chosen day You can store up to 20 notes Input the subject and then press left soft key OK You enter the appropriate information in the follow section Time Repeat and Alarm View Menu 4 1 2 View all schedules and memo for the chosen day Use to browse through...

Page 187: ...notes Memo Menu 4 2 Memo function allow to freely write memos max 39 characters Differently from the Agenda events there are no alarms for Memo 1 Select the Memo by pressing the left soft key OK 2 If being empty Add new by pressing the left soft key Add 3 Input the memo and then press left soft key Ok Calendar Settings Menu 4 3 You can choose a type of calendar A D Hijriya or Farsi by using this f...

Page 188: ... Sound You can insert sounds that are available for short messages Text templates You can use Text templates already set in the phone Contacts You can add phone numbers or e mail addresses in the address book Business card You can add your Signature to the message 5 After you complete the message to select the required option press the left soft key Options Options Send Sends text messages 1 Enter...

Page 189: ...er the New message menu by pressing the left soft key OK 2 If you want to write a new message select Write multimedia message 3 You can create a new message or choose one of the multimedia message templates already made 4 Press Insert to add Symbol Photo Take photo Picture Sound Voice memo Text templates Contacts Business card Maximum available file size that can be inserted to MMS message is 100 ...

Page 190: ...it mode has been set to T9ABC T9Abc T9abc T9 languages Select the desired language for T9 input mode You can also deactivate T9 input mode by selecting T9 off Exit Will take you back to the Message menu Inbox Menu 5 2 You will be alerted when you have received a message They will be stored in the Inbox In the Inbox you can identify each message by icons For detail see the icon directive Note When ...

Page 191: ...rty Return call You can call back the sender Delete You can delete the current message View information You can view information about received messages Sender s address Subject only for Multimedia message Message date time Message type Message size Delete all You can delete all messages Drafts Menu 5 3 Using this menu you can preset up to five multimedia messages that you use most frequently This...

Page 192: ...information such as weather reports traffic news taxis pharmacies and stock prices When you receive an info service message you will see a popup message show you that or the info service message is directly displayed To view the message again follow the sequence shown below Read Menu 5 6 1 1 When you have received an info service message and select Read to view the message it will be displayed on ...

Page 193: ... Multimedia templates Menu 5 7 2 After you have saved a new template you can use the following options View You can see multimedia templates Edit You can edit multimedia templates Add new Allows you to add new multimedia templates Write messages You can write and send multimedia messages Delete You can delete multimedia templates Delete all Allows you to delete all multimedia messages Settings Men...

Page 194: ... sent successfully Auto download If you select On you receive multimedia messages automatically If you select Off you receive only notification message in the inbox and then you can check this notification If you select Home network only you receive multimedia messages depends on Homenetwork Network settings If you select multimedia message server you can set URL for multimedia message server Perm...

Page 195: ... any more Alert Yes Your phone will beep when you have received Info service message numbers No Your phone will not beep even though you have received info service messages Languages You can select the language you want by pressing On Off Then the info service message will be shown in the language that you selected Push messages Menu 5 8 5 You can set the option whether you will receive the messag...

Page 196: ...20x240 640x480 Frame shot 128x160 Size settings are available Still shot 48x48 128x160 320x240 640x480 Multi shot 128x160 320x240 Frame shot 128x160 Quality Allows you to set the image quality from Fine Normal Super fine Auto save If you select On automatically you can save the photos taken Album Allow you to see photos saved in your phone Exit Back to the screen mode to take photos Zoom Allowing ...

Page 197: ... Flash Allows you to set the flash when you take a photo in dark surroundings To take a picture with phone closed 1 Press and hold for a few seconds 2 A list will be displayed on the sub LCD Take picture Activates the Take photo mode Torch Activate the flash light Back Go back to the previous menu A short press of the camera to take a photo ...

Page 198: ...o activate and press the left soft key OK or OK key 3 Then select Activate Personalise Menu 7 1 2 Scroll to the desired profile in the Profile list After pressing the left soft key or the OK key select Personalise The profile setting option opens Set the option as required Call alert type Set the alert type for incoming calls Ring tone Select the desired ring tone from the list Ring volume Set the...

Page 199: ... in the profile list and after pressing the left soft key or the OK key select Rename 2 Key in the desired name and press the OK key or the left soft key OK Date Time Menu 7 2 You can set functions relating to the date and time Date Menu 7 2 1 Set date You can enter the current date Date format You can set the Date format such as DD MM YYYY MM DD YYYY YYYY MM DD D Day M Month Y Year Time Menu 7 2 ...

Page 200: ...ected menu before open the menu The state is shown at bottom of the display Network name If you set ON Network name the name of service provider will appear on both Sub LCD and Main LCD Language Menu 7 3 2 You can change the language for the display texts in your phone This change will also affect the Language Input mode Call Setting Menu 7 4 You can set the menu relevant to a call by pressing OK ...

Page 201: ...heck recent five diverted numbers Cancel Deactivate the corresponding service View status View the status of the corresponding service Answering phone Menu 7 4 2 Allow you to set your phone into automatic answering mode for adjusting environment Answering off Allow you to inactivate the answering phone mode General You can adjust the answering phone mode as General Meeting You can adjust the answe...

Page 202: ...te the listened voice messages Call You can call back to the caller who leave voice message by using this function Save You can save phone number from the recorded voice messages Write text message You can send a short text message to the caller who leave voice message Write multimedia message You can send a multimedia message to the caller who leave voice message Ringing time Allow you to set you...

Page 203: ... such as line 1 or line 2 Call waiting Menu 7 4 5 Network Service Activate If you select Activate you can accept a waiting receiving call Cancel If you select Cancel you cannot recognize the waiting receiving call View status Shows the status of Call waiting Minute minder Menu 7 4 6 If you select On you can check the call duration by beep sound every minute during a call Auto redial Menu 7 4 7 On ...

Page 204: ...ty code if you set phone lock to when swith on If you set phone lock to when SIM changed your phone will request security code only when you change your SIM card Call barring Menu 7 5 3 The Call barring service prevents your phone from making or receiving certain category of calls This function requires the call Network password You can view the following submenus All outgoing The barring service ...

Page 205: ...n view the number list saved as Fixed dial number Change codes Menu 7 5 5 PIN is an abbreviation of Personal Identification Number to prevent use by unauthorized person You can change the access codes PIN code PIN2 code and Security Code 1 If you want to change the Security code PIN PIN2 code input your original code and then press OK 2 Input new Security code PIN PIN2 code and verify them Network...

Page 206: ...n networks Band select Menu 7 6 2 You can select a network type EGSM DCS According to depending on Network situation you can select EGSM DCS PCS only According to depending on Network situation you can select PCS only GPRS attach Menu 7 7 You can set GPRS service depending on various situations Switch on Menu 7 7 1 If you select this menu the phone is automatically registered to a GPRS network whe...

Page 207: ...8 You can check free space and memory usage of each repository Internal memory and Multimedia memory You can go to each repository menu Reset settings Menu 7 9 You can initialize all factory defaults You need Security code to activate this function ...

Page 208: ... any time press the key The phone will return to the previous menu Navigating with the WAP browser You can surf the Internet using either the phone keys or the WAP browser menu Using the phone keys When surfing the Internet the phone keys function differently to phone mode Using the WAP browser menu There are various menu options available when surfing the Mobile Web Home Menu 8 1 Connects to a ho...

Page 209: ...e URL and or the title of the selected bookmark Delete Deletes the selected bookmark Delete all Deletes all the selected bookmarks Go to URL Menu 8 3 You can connect directly to the site you want After entering a specific URL press the OK key Settings Menu 8 4 You can set the profile cache cookie and security related to internet service Profiles Menu 8 4 1 A profile is the network information used...

Page 210: ...red GPRS settings The service settings are only available when GPRS is chosen as a bearer service APN Input the APN of the GPRS User ID The users identify for your APN server Password The password required by your APN server Proxy settings Proxy Activates or cancels proxy IP address Input the IP address of the Proxy server you access Port number Input the Proxy Port DNS settings Primary server Inp...

Page 211: ...che Clear cookie Menu 8 4 5 Removes all context saved in cookie Security Menu 8 4 6 A list of the available certification is shown Authority You can see the list of authority certificates that have been stored in your phone Personal You can see the list of personal certificates that have been stored in your phone Note A cache is a buffer memory which is used to save data temporarily ...

Page 212: ...n You can view the information about Title Size Date and Time you ve taken Protection You can lock the picture for deleting by mistake in this menu General pictures Menu 9 1 2 You can view all pictures except of frame and phone book ones In addition you can see the same option menus like All pictures 9 1 1 Phonebook pictures Menu 9 1 3 You can view all phonebook pictures Set as wallpaper You can s...

Page 213: ... The image downloaded from network can be sent by Bluetooth Delete You can delete a image Rename You can change the image name Sounds Menu 9 3 You can insert the Default sounds or downloads in Media album that are available for short messages Default sounds Menu 9 3 1 Options Set as ringtone Currently selected sound can be set as a ringtone Write text message Multimedia message The sound downloade...

Page 214: ...ted sound can be set as a ringtone Write multimedia message The sound downloaded from network can be sent by MMS Send via Bluetooth The sound downloaded from network can be sent by Bluetooth Delete You can delete a image Rename You can change the ringtone name Games Apps Menu 9 4 In this menu you can manage the Java applications installed on your phone You can play or delete downloaded application...

Page 215: ...ty of accessories available for your mobile phone You can select these according to your personal communication requirements Consult your local dealer for availability Note Always use genuine LG accessories Failure to do this may invalidate your warranty Accessories may be different in different regions please check with our regional service company or agent for further enquiries Accessories 76 Ac...

Page 216: ...Te c h n i c a l d ata Technical data 77 General Product name KG245 System GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 Ambient Temperatures Max 55 C Min 10 C ...

Page 217: ......

Page 218: ......

Page 219: ......

Page 220: ...MEMO ...

Page 221: ...MEMO ...

Page 222: ...MEMO ...

Page 223: ...MEMO ...

Page 224: ...MEMO ...

Page 225: ...MEMO ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for KG245 - Cell Phone 8 MB

Samsung Galaxy S Blaze 4G Instructions preview
Galaxy S Blaze 4G
Brand: Samsung Pages: 4
Samsung Galaxy S Blaze 4G Start Manual preview
Galaxy S Blaze 4G
Brand: Samsung Pages: 27
Samsung Galaxy S 4 mini Getting Started Manual preview
Galaxy S 4 mini
Brand: Samsung Pages: 26
Samsung GALAXY S GT-I9000 User Manual preview
GALAXY S GT-I9000
Brand: Samsung Pages: 132
Samsung Galaxy S Aviator Quick Reference Manual preview
Galaxy S Aviator
Brand: Samsung Pages: 56
Samsung Galaxy Note20 Ultra 5G Quick Start Manual preview
Galaxy Note20 Ultra 5G
Brand: Samsung Pages: 2
Samsung Galaxy Note20 5G Quick Reference Manual preview
Galaxy Note20 5G
Brand: Samsung Pages: 2
Samsung Galaxy Note II Get Started preview
Galaxy Note II
Brand: Samsung Pages: 41
Samsung Galaxy Note 9 Settings Manual preview
Galaxy Note 9
Brand: Samsung Pages: 2
Samsung Galaxy Note 8 Quick Reference Manual preview
Galaxy Note 8
Brand: Samsung Pages: 28
Samsung Galaxy Note 8 Basic Manual preview
Galaxy Note 8
Brand: Samsung Pages: 65
Samsung GALAXY MEGA How To Use The 2 Sim Cards preview
GALAXY MEGA
Brand: Samsung Pages: 7
Samsung GALAXY ON5 User Manual preview
GALAXY ON5
Brand: Samsung Pages: 109
Samsung GALAXY Note 8.0 Repair Manual preview
GALAXY Note 8.0
Brand: Samsung Pages: 51
Samsung Galaxy S III Get Started preview
Galaxy S III
Brand: Samsung Pages: 36
Samsung Galaxy S III Important Information Manual preview
Galaxy S III
Brand: Samsung Pages: 68
Samsung GALAXY Young Quick Start Manual preview
GALAXY Young
Brand: Samsung Pages: 17
Handspring Treo 270 Specification Sheet preview
Treo 270
Brand: Handspring Pages: 2

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands